Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. 1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels. and plumbing engineering workflows. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. fixtures. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. such as duct. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. such as mechanical equipment. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. electrical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. 3 . including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and piping.

Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. as well as how to open and save them. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. However.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you learn where the training files are located. is located and accessed in the training files location. After completing each exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. annotations. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation. however. Metric: files for users working with metric units. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Create detail views. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Contact your CAD manager for more information. views. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. your Training folder may be in a different location. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Create schedules. to provide a richer and more finished design. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. and tags. When you open a training file. You do not design entire systems. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. when you add ductwork. On the Contents tab. For example. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. templates. So. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Metric file names have an _m suffix. In this exercise. For example. you can choose to save your work. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and sheets to document the project. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. such as templates and families. These elements enhance the exercises you complete.

4 Click the training file name. a list of file types displays. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. the Open dialog displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. enter the new file name. and click Open. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 8 If you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Accessing Training Files | 5 . A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. You may close the file with or without saving changes. For File name. and click the Training Files icon.rvt and make changes. 3 In the right pane. double-click Imperial or Metric. select the folder in which to save the new file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. you are prompted to save the changes. and you can open any supported file type. if you open settings. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt) is selected. scroll down. For example.rvt. verify that Project Files (*. click ➤ Save As. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For Files of type.

6 .

This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the door retains this relationship to the partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. If you move the partition. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. quantities. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and phases when you need it. As you work in drawing and schedule views. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the operation of the software is parametric. every drawing sheet.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawings. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. drawing sheets. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In this case. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. schedules. scope. and plans. ■ ■ 7 . the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the hierarchy of elements. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If the length of the elevation is changed. sections. In the Revit MEP model. You learn the terminology. 2D and 3D view. the floor or roof remains connected. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. and schedules required for a building project. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. hence.

sprinklers. For example. boilers. They display in relevant views of the design. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. and electrical panels. For example. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ducts. dimensions. Datum elements help to define project context.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. ducts. levels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. grids. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. sprinklers. When you change something. walls and ceilings are hosts. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. sinks. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Examples include detail lines. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and keynotes are annotation elements. and electrical panels. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. sinks. They help to describe or document the design. filled regions. tags. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

By using a single project file. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. families. from geometry to construction data. and so forth). The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. For example. for example. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. top of wall. In other cases. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. However. Often.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. and types. Most often. In Revit MEP. or bottom of foundation. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. schedules. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. programming is not required. and ceilings. you can explicitly control them. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. North . To place levels. and drawings of the design. floors. This information includes components used to design the model. section views.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. first floor. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. such as roofs. you must be in a section or elevation view. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. views of the project. elevation views. Project: In Revit MEP. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. If you can draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships.

For example. For example. System families include ducts. showing. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A type can be a specific size of a family. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. such as a A0 title block. pipes. and similar graphical representation. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Then experiment with them. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. and wires. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . System families can be transferred between projects. With a few clicks. hiding. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. each in-place family contains only a single type. A type can also be a style. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Type: Each family can have several types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can also display several project views at one time. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Unlike system and standard component families. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. However. identical use. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.

you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file.

tools used for editing existing elements. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and settings. data and systems. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. architect-specific tools. and for switching views.. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. project and system parameters.. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and CAD files. select the tool first.

provides requested information. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. closes the application menu (double-click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . To keep a panel expanded. displays frequently used tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. For example. provides access to common tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. By default. when adding duct. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. click. (Open) save the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a template and create a new drawing.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands... (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ..

annotation. but is not enabled by default.... To enable or disable a tool item. click. or template file. publish the current project. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . saves a current project. (Licensing) close the file. family. or template file.. annotation. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. to. provides views including Default 3D. (Publish) print the current drawing. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Print) access product and license information. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family.On the application menu. and Walkthrough. Camera. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. workshared components. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Group. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. When you are using a command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. In addition. repeat the command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame.To undo or redo a series of operations. check the Status Bar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. when you switch to another editing mode. Clipboard. To hide the Status Bar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Starting with the most recent command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. This displays the command history in a list. When you are highlighting an element or component. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. or the Family Editor. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). However. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Modify. To show the Status Bar again. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. displaying the same information. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). for example. Place a Wall. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. To change existing elements to a different type. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar.

Zoom the view In the tutorials. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the following steps. For example. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. After you are familiar with these tasks. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. click Training Files.

the view zooms in on the selected area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. When you release the mouse button. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 9 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. on the Navigation bar. 6 Click in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Modifying the View | 19 . this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. To modify or add snap increments. click .

The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and click tin the Options dialog. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. To define settings for SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. press ESC. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For more information about SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design.

called drag controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. and select the duct.Design. as shown. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 Enter ZR. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and open Level 2 . bottoms. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the Undo command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.

The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. for example. and drag it to the left as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move. In this case. and click again to specify the ending position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. click to specify the starting position.Some commands. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 14 Enter VG. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Select Mechanical . Press ESC twice.End a command Some commands. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Supply. For example.Return. Click OK. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 13 To end a command. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. such as coordination review and interference checking. 6 Click OK. the default building levels and standard views. click Training files. In that case. and open North. 27 . Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. system families. and loadable families. use copy/monitor. Finally. link files.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. New projects inherit all the families. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. settings. You can either select a template from the template library. create and manage views. under Create new. and modify system settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and open Metric ➤ Templates. such as the default project units and settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click Open. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. such as ducts and pipes. and geometry from the starting template. select Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You can choose from several templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.rte template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.

click Browse. for City. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. select Project template. Click OK twice. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. review the construction materials listed. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. In the Choose Template dialog. click (Browse). NH. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects.rte template and click Open. (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. select Level 1. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. If you want to use a template other than the default. Click OK. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. select Manchester. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select School or University. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ For Building Construction. For example. under Energy Analysis. navigate to Metric Templates. 10 Using the same method. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Click Cancel. create another new project using the Construction template. you can select it now. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ Under Create new.8 In the drawing area. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. For Location. When you select the material. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for Energy Data.

27 Click OK. 33 Click OK. and demand factors for electrical systems. Holding CTRL. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. for 20. 26 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. piping.rfa and click Open.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under.00 mm. click Round.00 mm.00 mm. under Duct Settings.00 mm.000 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for 90. click Rectangular.00 mm. For Categories.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 310. click Wiring. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. plumbing. 260. 23 In the left pane. 22 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Duct Settings.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. Click OK twice. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm. 290. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 140. under Pipe Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select Views. select Identity Data. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 110. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. wiring. 110. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 140. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. for 90. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 25 In the left pane. click Sizes. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. After standard settings have been established for an organization. power distribution systems. 24 In the right pane. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

and groups that are contained in a project. under Create new. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Click Open. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.rvt. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 38 Close the file. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .Origin to Origin. select Project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training. 5 Click OK. From the Positioning list. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. select View Name. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. In addition. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. To enable this coordination. Linking Projects In this exercise. For Sort by. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. under Template file. select Family and Type. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Auto . 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Associated Level. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Sub-Discipline. Notice that the file is saved as a template. sheets. families.

12 Click OK. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 8 If necessary. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. under Constraints. select Room Bounding. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .Mech. Linking Projects | 31 . reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select the linked architectural model.

19 On the left side of the view. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. click the level line for 03. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.Floor.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. click Plan View types. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. select Custom. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Linking Projects | 33 . warnings notify you of any violations. If you modify a monitored element. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. and the level 4. click Custom. 27 In the drawing area. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. After copying. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. level 3. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. and that the copied elements are monitored. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears above the copied elements. 34 On the Basics tab. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. indicating that a relationship is established. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. indicating that an element has changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. for the link file. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. a warning message displays.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. highlight the linked model. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. click By Host View. and click to select the linked model. 29 In the drawing area.

of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Edit. deselect Levels. click Custom. Planting. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. deselect Parking. 36 Click OK. click Custom. Under Visibility. 3 In the View templates dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . for Name. and Topography. 7 Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Site. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . select Custom. Roads. 5 On the Basics tab. for the link file. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Under Visibility. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Click OK. under View Properties.

6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. journal cleanup options. click the Graphics tab. under Template file. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. Modifying System Settings | 35 . 2 In the Options dialog. These settings control the graphics.rte.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. under View Templates. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and your username when using worksharing. 8 Click ➤ Options. select Mechanical and click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. 3 Under Colors. 9 In the Options dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. notification preferences. selection default options. select Invert background color. Notice that the drawing area is black. they are not saved to project files or template files. 7 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. click Browse. and click OK.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. including your default project template. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 13 Under Notifications. click the value for Selection color. 19 Press ESC to end the command. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. family template files. 2 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. click the File Locations tab. 11 In the Color dialog. the elements causing the error display using this color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 18 Select the wall. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and family libraries. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. select One hour. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 17 Press ESC to end the command. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. you specify default file locations. However. select yellow. 21 Close the file without saving it. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 12 Click the General tab. 14 Click OK. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.10 Under Colors. select None. and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.

3 Under Default template file. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. click Places. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 4 Click Cancel. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and Import dialogs. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Browse. and you can create new libraries. However. centralized. You can modify the existing library names and path. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. and click Open. Load. TIP To view a template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. you can start a new project with that template. 5 Under Default path for user files. 7 In the Options dialog. 10 In the Places dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. click Browse. saving. such as in a large. Save. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Specifying File Locations | 37 . Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 8 Click Cancel. When you are opening. note the list of library names. In the following illustration. or loading a Revit MEP file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. Click and click Browse to select a template. under Default path for family template files. click Browse.

click the My Library icon. and click (Browse). 15 Under Library Name. click (Add Value). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. ➤ Open. and Import dialogs. and change the name to My Library. templates. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click Open. Load. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK twice. and select it as the library path. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. Save.11 In the Places dialog. or families. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 5 In the text editor. such as bump maps.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. and decal image files. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Click ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click Edit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. custom color files. This path is determined during installation. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify the new location here. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 21 On the File Locations tab. 2 In the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you work in a large office. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click Places. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 9 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 11 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 27 Click OK. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Select My Library. click OK. select Ignore words in uppercase. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. view the current path. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 3 Under Settings. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you want to relocate this path.

18 Click ➤ Options. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. In this exercise.rte. You can turn snap settings on and off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click the Spelling tab. you modify snap settings. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and enter 500 . As you zoom in and out within a view. click Training Files. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Dimension Snaps. 20 Under Settings. under Template file.. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Restore Defaults. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click OK. 23 In the text editor. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Browse. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you modify snap increments. 2 In the New Project dialog. click OK.17 In the Spelling dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Close. 22 In the text editor. click Edit. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 In the New Project dialog.

If it does not. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click OK. such as ZO to zoom out. enter SM. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. deselect Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and move the cursor to the right. For example. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. While sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.7 Under Object Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse.

. with or without saving it. the midpoint. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Do not set the wall end point. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Notice that snapping is once again active.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 19 Enter SM. 26 Close the file. and the wall edges. and specify the wall endpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. and move the cursor to the right. 25 Click OK. and delete the value 500 . If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the mechanical system. you will understand the process. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you design a mechanical system for an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. methodology. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This system consists of a cooling tower. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of the tutorial. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. In this exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you first configure the linked architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. By following the recommended workflow. In this lesson. water source heat pump (WSHP). To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. duct system and a hydronic piping system. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.autodesk. 45 . go to http://www. and then you create a plenum level. you first plan the system. However. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

and double-click West . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you add a level for plenums. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE When working with a linked file. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. These components are defined in the architectural training file.rvt. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. select Room Bounding.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. ceilings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. under Constraints. not in the MEP training file.Space Plan is highlighted. In this section. Next. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and click OK. and after the linked model highlights. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. roof. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. click to select it. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.MEP. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.

click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. The new level is placed. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). enter 2600mm. and enter Level 2 Plenum. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Plan View Types. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 16 Press Esc. and click Properties.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and click OK. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 9 On the Draw panel. Preparing Spaces | 47 . A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.

21 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and click Apply Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. For Cut plane. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. right-click Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. Under View Depth. for Top. you place spaces in areas of the building model. click Edit. and for Offset. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for Level. for View Scale. In this exercise.Plenum. select MEP . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select Level Above (Level 3). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Identity Data. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and then place spaces in various types of areas.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. However. ■ Click OK twice. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Design. For Sub-Discipline. enter an Offset of 300mm. for Default View Template. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Under Extents. In the next exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. For View Classification. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. select Plenum Plan. you can choose to save your work.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for View Range.

5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Upper Limit. For (Tag Location). Placing Spaces | 49 . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. walls. enter 0. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Horizontal.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceilings). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select Level 2 Plenum. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select New. For Space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Offset. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the drawing area. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ensuring coordination between the files. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 9 Select the space. for Number. enter Library. For Name. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.7 Click to place the space. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).

select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Offset. For Upper Limit.

and then split the space using a space separation line. you place a space in a large corridor area.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and for Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and then press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. select Level 3.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. for Upper Limit. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 5 On the Options Bar.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click in the name column.7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the space number to 216A. and scroll to the newly placed space. and select Corridor. 10 Click in the number column. which was numbered 219Q. 9 In the schedule.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 15 Press Esc twice. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. you place a space in a chase.16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. If necessary. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Space Plan is highlighted.

select the space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. click in the chase area to place the space. select Interior and Reference. right-click. for Upper Limit.4 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. and click Element Properties. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 10 In the plan view. enter 0. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Level 3. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 12 Click in the section view. expand Spaces. and then click OK. In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. On the Options Bar. select Roof Level. for Upper Limit. 6 Enter VG.

enter Chase. and maximize the view. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.Space Plan. for Name.■ For Limit Offset. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. floors. under Loaded Tags. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and click OK. enter 225PC. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 15 Press Esc. Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 17 Type ZF. enter 1200. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Under Identity Data. For Number. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. ceilings.

click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Spaces. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. To display space reference lines. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 1 In the Project Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. After a space is placed in an area. indicating that it’s the active view. it is automatically added to the Default zone.Zoning is highlighted. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. In the next exercises.20 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. click View ➤ Zones. In this exercise. which removes the space from the Default zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. double-click 121 Cafeteria.Zoning is highlighted. select Occupiable. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Next. the Edit Zone tab displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. ) or 5 In the System Browser. under Energy Analysis. and a new zone is created. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference.rvt. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The Zone tool is active. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. indicating that the space is occupiable. and click OK. click Training Files. you assign spaces to a zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. As you do this. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . indicating that it’s the active view. To display space reference lines. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). under Spaces. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.

3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Click OK. 4 In the drawing area. select HVAC Zones. type VG. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Instruction. select Computer Lab 222. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. To view the zone in the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you need to activate the zone visibility. and click Finish Editing Zone.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Expand HVAC Zones. and modify the zone properties. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Using the Edit Zone tab. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). In the System Browser. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction 221. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

5 Click in the Level 1 . expand 2 .rvt. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.West .Zoning is highlighted. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. and verify the zone in the System Browser. click Finish Editing Zone. click Reference. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. for Name. To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 11 Close the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 10 On the Edit Zone tab.Area B. indicating that it’s the active view. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Zoning. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Identity Data. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. You activated zone visibility in the views. click Training Files.West . and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning view to activate it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. under Spaces. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . enter 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 9 In the System Browser.

Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click in the Level 2 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 12mm. Select Attached End. 15 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. zoom out. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning floor plan. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .

on the ViewCube. click Training Files. click the corner where the Top. and select 109 Lounge. In this exercise.Zoning view. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.rvt. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you verify the building. double-click Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Front. verify that Wireframe is selected. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and click OK. for Name Value. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and zone information. double-click the zone tag. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.East. space. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Lounge .

66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. select 1_South_Area C. ■ Click (Highlight). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. click (Isolate). you isolate the space. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ ■ On the Details tab. Using the Highlight tool.

11 °C : 32. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and click OK. the zone information displays for the selected zone.33 °C : 12. and then click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. verify that 21. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Next. and then click OK. For People.22 °C : N/A is specified. scroll down in the left pane. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . heating air temperature.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and air changes per hour. click (Shading). the space information displays for the selected space. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This indicates the cooling set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. click .22 °C : N/A is specified. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point. Next. ■ ■ ■ Next. For Cooling Information. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For Electrical Loads. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . verify that <Building> is selected. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. verify that 23. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and in the People dialog. select 109 Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area. and humidification set point. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Construction Type. select Lounge/Recreation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. cooling air temperature. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.

18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. open MEP . highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Offset. select Level 3. floors. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Cancel. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. roofs. and other room-bounding components. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 0.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.

23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Because this is an unoccupied space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. you verified building. select Plenum. and select space Plenum 212P. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Click OK. Under Energy Analysis. for Number. For Name. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In this exercise. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. and zone information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Energy Analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

For Building Construction. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Click OK twice. for Energy Data. click Training Files. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. click in the Value field. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the drawing area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Volume Computations. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. NH. for Building Service. click Edit. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. If. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that 300 is specified. For Location. verify that Level 1 is selected. under Energy Analysis. verify that <Building> is specified. For Export Complexity.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select School or University. verify that Manchester. and click Element Properties. For Sliver Space Tolerance. For Project Phase. right-click. For Postal Code. enter 03101. On the Weather tab. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select space Library 219. you need to select this option. double-click Level 2 . For Ground Plane. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. is selected. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. for City. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. this option adjusts the times automatically. On the Place tab. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog.Space Plan. In order to select a space.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.

for Values. For Space Type. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Sensible. select Actual. for Values. Under Power. is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. 12 Click the Details tab. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Specified.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. enter 60 W. For Location. a cooling load. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Click OK. select Specified. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that School or University is selected. NH. both. m. For Building Construction. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . for Values. For Latent. You have verified the building information. Click OK twice. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Building Service. click in the Value column. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Manchester. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Select Area per person. For Condition Type. select Heated and cooled. verify that <Building> is specified. enter 45 W. Next. select Library . and enter 15 sq. click Edit. verify that Occupiable is selected. For People. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. or neither. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual. and click OK. and then click .Audio Visual.

click Calculate. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and under Heating Information. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . or zone information. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. click Information). and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. select 219 Library. select 219 Library. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and zone information for the building model. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. or make any changes to the model. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 Review the loads report for project. You should correct the space error in the building model. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. There should be no warnings displayed.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. under Energy Analysis.11°C. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . space. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and click OK. In this exercise. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 21 Click OK. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 19 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. space.Space Plan. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 17 In the loads report. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and a loads report displays. weather. 16 After you review the loads report. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here.

rvt. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . indicating that it’s the active view. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 5 Zoom in to the legend. in relatively small increments. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Click OK. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. select HVAC Zones. 3 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Cooling Load . 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.Expanded Ranges. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. 11 Using the method learned previously. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the next exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.rvt. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. click Training Files. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Formula. For Phase.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter . click (Browse). Select Formula. and then click . double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Discipline. select New Construction. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Schedule building components. for Formula. select Spaces. and click OK. for Select available fields from. Under Available fields. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow.Space Fill is the active view. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Click OK. ■ Click Calculated Value. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Air Flow. Click OK. more category options are available. In the Fields dialog. select Spaces. select HVAC. In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Type. enter Airflow Delta. In the Calculated Value dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule.

notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. select Airflow Delta. Click OK twice. ■ The schedule displays. select Not Between. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. a view opens that contains the selected space. Under Conditions to Use. and then click Conditional Format. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Level. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. select red. Select Ascending. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and Blank line. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. For Value. right-click to access schedule properties. In the Color dialog. select Level. select Number. For Then by. For Background Color. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Header. verify that Show is highlighted. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and click OK. click the color swatch. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

In the next lesson. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project.

As you place the air terminals.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you modify air terminal parameters. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and work with the airflow schedule. 79 . Then. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will create supply air systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After system creation. After completing the air systems lesson. In this lesson. you size ductwork and validate your air system design.

4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. indicating that it’s the active view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to space 223. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.

NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Also. type 3600. as shown. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Placement panel. 15 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc to end the command. and press Enter. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 17 Move the cursor down. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select the diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. the hosted elements are updated as well. click Place on Face. enter 215 L/s.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . If the host element is modified or moved. for Flow. verify that Constrain is cleared. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.

25 In the drawing area. and click Open. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. and then press Esc. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. As you place the return diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 28 On the Placement tab. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 24 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. as shown. 29 Place 2 diffusers. click Place on Face. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 22 In the drawing area. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next. click Yes.rfa.

and click to select the lines. under Other. select one of the return diffusers. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Strong Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 32 In the Project Browser. Level. for Reference. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. align the other return diffuser. and then press Esc twice. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 43 Using the same method. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select the vertical grid line as shown. as shown.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 40 In the drawing area. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

As you place the air terminals.44 While pressing Ctrl. select both return diffusers. right-click. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and press Enter. 47 Using the same method. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. and on the Options Bar. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and click Element Properties. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. enter 310 L/s. for Flow. clear LeftArrow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and click OK. 48 Close the file with or without saving it.

and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. select M_Supply Diffuser .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 10 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. the space crossing lines display.Design to make it the active view. click 1 : 100. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 In the Type Selector. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. for Scale. 9 On the Options Bar.rvt. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.200 Neck. at the lower left corner of the building.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. expand HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and double-click Level 1 .

Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. enter 170 L/s.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Also. Under Mechanical . the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. and then press Enter. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. type 6000. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. By copying the diffuser. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 Press Esc. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Click OK. As a result. enter 2400.Airflow. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. under Constraints. 11 Select the diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. move the cursor down. for Offset. for Flow.

and then press Esc. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .16 Using the same method. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. clear Leader. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

for Embedded Schedule. and press Enter. and click View Properties. For Category. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. double-click System Type. it is a negative value. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Type. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. mark. 27 In the schedule. under Available Fields. and Flow. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. for Flow. Mark. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 29 Using the same method. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. enter 210 L/s. for Sort by. under Other. select Mark.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. tile the windows. type. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. select 21. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and then right-click in the schedule. click Edit. 25 Click OK 3 times. 26 Using the method learned previously. under space 115. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Next. select Air Terminals.

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.HVAC Plan .Design. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. and maximize Level 1 . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. as shown. As you highlight the zone. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. 31 In the drawing area.

34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. and under Energy Analysis.Horizontal .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.High Efficiency . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. select M_WSHP . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.3 times the heating load). 36 In the drawing area.43 W (approximately 1. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .7-18 kW . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 33 Click OK. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 35 In the Type Selector.

and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. and click OK. As you add diffusers to systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.rvt. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. However. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. right-click the title. enter . including energy analysis.HVAC Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. You then create the logical connection between the system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. IMPORTANT In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 44 Zoom in to space 115. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Keep the System Browser open.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

and the system connects them. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. the number of elements is updated. Connect Into. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. System Name. 18 Click OK. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 15 Click Cancel. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 Using the method learned previously. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and Flow value. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. review the Number of Elements. On the Options Bar. 12 In the System Browser. the air terminals are the children. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.

you create ductwork to physically connect system components. click Training Files. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 25 Click OK. under Identity Data. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Mechanical. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for Mark.Rename the system Next. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. for System Name. which updates the name in the System Browser.

Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset. the Network type provides several solutions. 4 In the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. In this case. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Round. select Network. which provides various layout tools.Design is highlighted. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Select Branch. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . enter 3000. For Offset. select the upper left diffuser. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan. and display solution 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Settings. For Duct Type. the space crossing lines display. 5 On the Options Bar. A Generate Layout tab displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for Solution Type. For Duct Type. enter 3000. Also.

10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. Click OK.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. you’ll get an error in a later step. 11 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. click Modify. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. enter 900. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select a different layout solution. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. as is the elbow itself.

15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Using a flow-based color scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. If the entire network does not highlight.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. a disconnection exists. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and click OK. The first time you press Tab. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and click to select it. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.Flow. Usually. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. thus it is not part of the system. for Color Scheme. fittings. highlight a segment of the main duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. select Duct Color Fill . and equipment.

Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and press Enter. under Mechanical . 20 In the drawing area.Airflow. for Flow. for Values Displayed. select the WSHP. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). but not all values are used in this view. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select By View. under Graphics. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. select one of the diffusers in the system. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and then click OK.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and click OK.

Select Restrict Height. for Branch Sizing. Under Constraints. and then click to select it. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Friction. Click OK. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.Velocity. for Schemes. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . highlight a segment of the duct. Select Only. and select 400. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct. and drag it to the right. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the color scheme legend. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. click Cancel.65 Pa/m. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Calculated Size Only. and enter . 26 Click OK.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Duct Color Fill .

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using this tool. static pressure.The ductwork and fittings are updated. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Use the information that displays (flow.

NOTE As you inspect a system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. click Training Files.rvt. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select the WSHP. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . and click Draw Duct.Design is highlighted. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 11 On the Options Bar. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Front. click the corner where the Top. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. double-click MEP . and click Draw Duct. enter 3000. 15 On the ViewCube.3D MEP. 14 In the Project Browser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

The ductwork is automatically created.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. in space 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.22 Using the same method. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. select a segment of the main duct.Airflow. and then click OK. and click to select it. for Flow. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 40 Using the same method. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Constraints. such as a plenum. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Mechanical .

108 .

In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. 109 . and a cooling tower located on the roof.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Then. on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Create return and supply piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.

Horizontal High Efficiency . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and select M_WSHP . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . in corridor 328.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Left Return . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.7-18kW . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.

verify that Wall faces is selected. and enter 600. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and click to place the dimension. 8 Click the corridor wall face. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. click the top edge of the WSHP.

Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.) 14 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. select the 2 WSHPs.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. enter 2750. for Offset.75 L/s. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Click OK. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 0.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. 21 Click Modify. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. but without a corresponding system. You can create pipes to connect system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. analyses cannot be performed. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Unlike logical connections (systems).

IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. where it is easier to review the information. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Creating a Piping System | 115 . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. In the System Browser. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the 2 WSHPs. 5 In the System Browser. As you assign equipment to systems.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Assigning a system component to an existing system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . right-click the Systems column heading. Therefore. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.HVAC Plan .Mech 330). It does not indicate a pipe layout path. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. indicating that it’s the active view. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.Design is highlighted. This display indicates that the system is selected. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files.rvt. while pressing Ctrl. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .

12 In the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. 10 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Editing System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. You have created the hydronic return system. Notice that on the Options Bar. and the Edit System tool is not active. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

HVAC Plan . Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. In heating mode. under Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and select the cooling tower.Design. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 23 Close the roof plan view. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and bypasses the cooling tower. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 . select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out.

34 Close the file with or without saving it. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). you can view several parameters. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . expand Piping. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click OK. under Mechanical. and click Expand All. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 28 Using the same method. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click Properties. 32 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Water Flow. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. indicating the logical connection. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Select. and click Column Settings.8.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. enter 0. In the System Browser. 29 Right-click CHWS. including the flow rate and size of the component.

HVAC Plan . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. When you draw a box to select components. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).rvt. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click OK. select Mechanical Equipment.Mech 330).Design is highlighted. A system preview displays in red. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and click to select it. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . you can place the cursor over a system component.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). click Training Files. click Check None. 5 In the Filter dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. press Tab to highlight the system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the boiler. then the Select a System dialog displays. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.

Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Click OK. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWR. select Perimeter. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. click Settings. verify that Solutions is selected. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. structural beams. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. enter 450. 13 Click Cancel. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.

17 Optionally. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. With each Tab. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the flow for each WSHP is 0. to display the path with thinner lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 19 In the drawing area.75 L/s. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .

and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 1. verify that the value for Flow is 1.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.75 L/s). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0.50 L/s. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK.50 L/s. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical.

the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). On the Options Bar. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 28 In the Project Browser.Design. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . 32 Click Finish Editing System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 35 Using the drag control.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. access its instance properties. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. you physically close the CHWR loop. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. which propagates flow throughout the system. so the total flow of 6. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.44 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .94 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. note that the value for Flow is 4. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. under Mechanical.50 L/s. as shown.94 L/s. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.

44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select Perimeter 1 of 5. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Inset.00%. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. select a WSHP. and then click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select CHWS. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 450. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope. enter 0. Click Settings. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.

45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.

as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 50 Using the same method. or offset elevations are incorrect. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . select a different layout solution. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. To create the piping system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. As you work in the training file. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan . 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the return pipes are magenta. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. double-click 3D Building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 7 In the plan view. as shown. 6 Press Delete.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Click to move the piping.

13 In the plan view. and the lower one is secondary. 12 In the 3D view. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The connections are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. select the return pipe riser.11 In the Select Connector dialog. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and click OK. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

In a plan view. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and you select 1 connector. enter 381. enter 600. and press Enter. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right.

and the appropriate fittings are created. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice. select the primary base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view. and click OK. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click the minus symbol. you select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. and select it. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right.

and click to create the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.28 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 29 If necessary. enter 1200. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the discharge connector.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.33 Press Esc. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

35 Using the method learned previously. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. as shown. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

and click to create the pipe. enter 2850. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.■ Move the cursor down. type 300. for Offset. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system.

Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. for Cooling Water Flow.50 or 50% of the Flow.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. The flow is being propagated through the piping. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. notice that under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. and click Element Properties. notice that Flow is 6. and click Element Properties. which is rounded up to 3. 42 Click OK.44 L/s. right-click. under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Connect the cooling tower Next. 44 In the 3D view. view the properties for the secondary pump.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. select the cooling tower.44 L/s). and click OK. 46 Press Esc. 40 Click Cancel. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. right-click. under Mechanical. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. When you create the pumps in parallel. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. the value is 0 L/s. as shown. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .

■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

50 In the 3D View.44 L/s.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . select the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog.

you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and is heated by the boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Valves In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When the valve is open.Design is highlighted. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.52 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. the water bypasses the cooling tower.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown.

8 Press Esc twice. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 145 . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.4 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_Ball Valve . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The bypass valve is closed by default.

12 Select M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method.

Adding Valves | 147 . 19 Using the same method. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.44 L/s. and click OK. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. and click Element Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 6. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click.

Sizing Pipe In this exercise. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 20 Select the bypass valve. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Initially. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).44 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. In heating mode. 22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. click Training Files. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. validate that the Flow is 6.rvt.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.44 L/s.

3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sizing Pipe | 149 . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Flow. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. for Schemes. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. select Pipe Color Fill .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. click Pipe Color Fill . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Size.

and click to select the branch. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or offset elevations are incorrect.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Friction. and enter 220 Pa/m. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. Select And. for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity. enter 1. Under Constraints. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.5 m/s. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc.

Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspecting the System | 151 .Design ➤ 3D Views. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 3D Building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.

152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. flow. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as required. This information helps you modify the system design.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as shown. An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and pressure information including pressure loss.

targeting those systems that need attention. click Training Files. inspect Section 6 again.Note that the Flow is 1. the Static Pressure is 41916. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and double-click Level 3 .rvt. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. and click OK. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. you need to validate them. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and to size pipe.0 L/s.1 Pa. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Warnings display. 9 Using the same method.7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Fluid Temperature.4 Pa. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .HVAC Plan . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 32° C. In this exercise. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.

8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. double-click Level 1 . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. As you learned when placing components. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. thus assigning the components to a system. and click Expand All. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. For example. After you assign components to a system. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and select Level 3 . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. TIP If you have multiple views open.Design floor plan. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Show to view all of the system components.Design. In the System Browser. otherwise. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and confirm unassigned system components. right-click the Systems titlebar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click View. right-click Hydronic Return. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 9 Right-click CHWS. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 12 In the System Browser. 10 Using the same methods. the pipe is associated with that system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 4 In the System Browser. After you have assigned all components to systems. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. 7 In the System Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and for pipe sizing. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).HVAC Plan . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. expand the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. click Close.

14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

■ Click New Correction Factor. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90. expand Wiring .Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages.Wire Sizes. and demand factors that are applied in the design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Material. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. For Temperature. ■ ■ For Material. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Copper. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You also add a wiring type. click (Open). Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 1. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. wiring. As you place components and create circuits. distribution systems. enter THHN. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .rvt.04. For Factor. select Wiring Types. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. Select Correction Factor. speeding up the design phase. enter 70. click Training Files.

For Phase. select 3. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Click Split. select 10000 VA. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select 75. select Demand Factors. For Value. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 50. select Hot Conductor Size. For Insulation. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Neutral Size. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. enter 240. For L-G Voltage. For Maximum.0. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. enter 120/240. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Click OK. enter 240.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Neutral Multiplier. For Wires. For Max Size. Under More Than. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 250. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Power. select Steel. select THHN. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select 120. enter 220. select 240. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 1. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For L-L Voltage. For Conduit Type. select Voltage Definitions. For Minimum. enter 2000. By specifying a range. select Single. Select Neutral Required. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select Distribution Systems.

3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Electrical . because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Later in the tutorial.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. such as offices. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Electrical. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. select Illuminance. click Training Files. Under Categories. and conference rooms.Lighting group in the space element properties. For Type of Parameter. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. For Discipline. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). click Add. under the Electrical . You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). and double-click Level 2 . Verify that Instance is selected.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 5 In the drawing area. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Group Parameter Under. enter Required Lighting Level. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.Lighting Plan. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. restrooms. select Spaces.Lighting. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

and click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. For Name. Click OK. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. under Electrical . Select Schedule Keys. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. and for Key Name. enter Open Office. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. enter 485.Lighting. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter Lighting Levels. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click Required Lighting Level. under Available Fields. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Click OK. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.

for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method.Lighting Plan. select Required Lighting Level. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 21 Click OK twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. click Edit. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. change the sort order back to the default setting. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Notice that as you enter the data. which is mapped to project units. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. Select Blank Line. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.

select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. the value input applies only to the selected space. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In this exercise.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click OK. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Later in this exercise. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. click (Open). Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . under Identity Data. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. for Lighting Levels. select Instruction-Standard.

click (Add Value) again. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. and press Enter. Select the scheme for 500 lx. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00 lx. and in the At Least column. enter Required Lighting and click OK. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.rvt. Under Schemes. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. For Color. and press ENTER. select Required Lighting Level. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. and click (Add Value) five times.00.00 lx. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. click (Duplicate). Select the scheme for At Least 20. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog.00 lx. select Spaces. ■ Click OK. then the new value will be 400 lx. and click (Add Value). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Training Files. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. verify the By Range is selected. For example. for Name. enter 900. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. and press ENTER. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. Select the scheme for 450. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. enter 200. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes.00. enter Required Lighting Levels. for Title. enter 800. 00 lx still selected. for Category. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Illuminance. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Electrical. select Spaces. and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. double-click Number. 8 In the drawing area. select Required Lighting. For Name. for Available Fields. For Color Scheme. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. enter Lighting Delta. Level. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. Average Estimated Illumination. For Discipline. select Spaces. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Name. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Type. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting CF. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

select Lighting Delta. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Not Between. for Fields. Select Blank Line.■ For Formula. Click Conditional Format. for Sort by. On the Formatting tab. type a hyphen. click Browse. select Red. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. For Value. and click Browse. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. press the spacebar. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . under Condition. Click OK twice. Click OK three times. for Test. select Average Estimated Illumination. Select Header. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Click Background Color. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Formula. select Required Lighting Level. select Level. Click OK. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

as you place lighting fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create power loads. Then. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. First. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. power circuits. Create a panel schedule. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. 171 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.

select Average Estimated Illumination. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Ceiling plan. click (Open). we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. for the Spaces Category. You can create additional color schemes. In the Color dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. for Basic Colors. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Lighting CF view is open. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Click OK. select the color legend.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. By using orange as the color for this range. 7 In the Project Browser. Under Scheme Definition.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 8 In the Project Browser. select Orange.

zoom to space Library 219. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 13 Click the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.

17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 19 Press ESC to end the command.5 fc range is satisfied.the +/. 18 Click to place the fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.5 fc range. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. the fixtures will move accordingly. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.277V. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

enter 162. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. ■ Under Electrical Loads.00 VA. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. for Name enter and click OK. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Name dialog. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. for Apparent Load.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.

for Lamp.rvt. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. In the Select File dialog.00 lm. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click the value for Light Loss Factor. click (Open).93. junction boxes. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. ■ Click Apply. Placing Switches. select Xenon and click OK. enter F15. and receptacles to your design. specify 15000. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Photometrics. Junction Boxes. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Color Preset. you add switches. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Under Photometrics. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Type Mark. select T5 [HO]. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.ies and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. select Luminous Flux. Under Electrical. 2 In the drawing area. and Receptacles | 183 . Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. click the value for Initial Intensity. enter . 9 In space Library 219. Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color. In the next exercise. select 463T5_S.85. Placing Switches.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Junction Boxes. select the top center fixture. click Training Files. enter . and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.

7 Click to place the switch.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select M_Junction Boxes . The element type M_Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes.rfa and click Open. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.

Click Edit Type. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.14 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter JB-1NL. Under Electrical. enter 2750. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Mark. 21 In the drawing area.Offset. note the Number of Poles is 1. 15 Select the junction box. Click OK twice. NOTE When entering values. In the Type Properties dialog. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Level 2 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. zoom to space Library 219.

Expand Electrical. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Junction Boxes. 23 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. right-click and click Column Settings. 24 For any column. NOTE If necessary. Space Name. and Voltage. Click OK. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Distribution System. Select Load. Placing Switches. Space Number. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Receptacles | 187 . Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Size. and Number of Elements.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

move the cursor along the wall.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

Placing Switches. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

zoom to the space Electrical 220. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 2 In the drawing area. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. click Training Files. click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage.Surface: 100A. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .rvt.208V MCB . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

Loads. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 8 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. for Distribution System. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 20. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 480/277 Wye. enter 20. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter PP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. select 120/208 Wye.480V MCB .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 14 Select the panelboard. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. for Max. enter LP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. 15 On the Options Bar.Loads. for Distribution System. 9 On the Options Bar.

Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. which is the logical connection between the elements. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 38 Press ESC to end the command.

2 In the drawing area.Loads. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.39 Using the same method. click Check None. for Hot Conductors. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Category. enter 2. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. select Wires. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and create permanent wiring. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. except without wire. click Training Files.rvt. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog.

Expand Electrical. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Rating. expand Power. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Voltage. Distribution System. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and then expand circuit 1. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click OK. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and verify that Load. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected.

Click Tags. Click OK. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. change the Voltage to 277V. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. under Electrical. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

click Edit Type. Click Yes.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. under Identity Data. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. For Circuit Number. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. select Break. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 40 Click OK twice. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 47 In the drawing area. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter FR4. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. for Type Mark. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . click below the first one to place it. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK.

and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 57 In the Filter dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area.rfa. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. Click OK. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. click Check None. enter a comma. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.rvt. Click Save.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Next you create a switch system. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 52 In the Save As dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tags. and click Apply. for File Name. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. click (Open). and for Category. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. click Training Files. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. 54 Select all of the tags. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.

Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. under Electrical Lighting. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 . enter a. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for Switch ID. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Lighting. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. Click OK. enter b.

Click OK. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. under Electrical . 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Electrical Fixtures. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. lighting. for Hot Conductors. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click Check None.Loads. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 4 In the Filter dialog. Circuits are used for power. Click OK.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click (Open).rvt. and for Category. select the PP-2B panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Element Properties. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems.

and click to select the circuit. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and in the drawing area. and click Open. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. and in the right pane. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select Wiring. 19 Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.

as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 28 In the drawing area. click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Open. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. for Rating. Scroll down. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 1-#12. enter 30A.rvt. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#10. Click OK. Had there been a greater imbalance. click Training Files. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. zoom to space Electrical 220. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select panel LP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 3 In the Electrical space. the distribution is shifted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click OK. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Finally. Under Electrical-Loads. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 2 In the drawing area. 1-#10. After re-balancing loads. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits.

16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click OK. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a panel schedule. and click OK. enter 40A. 14 Close the warning dialog.Loads. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. under Electrical .Loads.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. select the transformer TP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. enter 25A. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 17 Close the warning dialog. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 24 Click Select Panel. under Electrical . 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click Finish Editing Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. select Berlin Sans FB.Panel Schedules. under Other. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Select PP-2B. for Font Size.rvt. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. click Edit. for Font. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Bold and Italic. Click OK. The Panel Schedule Report displays. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Under Header Text. 10 Click OK twice. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. enter 5 mm. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. expand Sheets (all). for Font Size. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 4 Close the report. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. enter 4 mm. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 5 In the Project Browser. and open E601 . Under Header Text. for Appearance. click Training Files. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 6 In the Project Browser. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Body Text.

214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Open). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. click Training Files. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. Expand Unassigned.rvt. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. for Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Warnings. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 15 In the dialog. In the System Browser. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Checking Your Design | 215 . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the drawing area. 18 Select panel LP-2C. select MDP-1.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Plumbing Plan . In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Sanitary.Vent. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Duplicate. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 4 In the Name dialog.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. planning is critical to a successful design. in addition to loading existing families.rvt. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and click OK. 219 . Adding a pipe size. In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . you create a PVC pipe type. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.

16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.PVC . select Sanitary. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the Project Browser. enter 54. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.rfa. Tap. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. for Material.PVC . and open Metric\M_Trap P . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.Sch 40 . For Offset. 17 In the left pane. 22 Click New Size. 21 In the right pane. select M_Tee Sanitary . click Training Files. 10 On the Selection panel. 27 For the new pipe size. click Pipe Settings. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 25 For Outside. 13 In the right panel. 15 For System Type. select Branch. 18 For System Type. enter 10°. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. under Pipe Types. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select None. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.Sch 40 . click Modify. Tee. select Tee.DWV: Standard.293 mm. enter 45.PVC . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.000 mm. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . for Nominal. 26 Click OK. 6 Click OK. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. enter 46. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Plastic. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Vent is listed.DWV: Standard. enter -1250. Cross. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.Sch 40 .006 mm. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. and click OK. and click Main. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Sanitary.

sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the cold water system. 221 . add a hot water heater. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. and hot and cold water piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. including plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The base is placed. select one of the components in the system.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. select Sanitary 107. A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog.

it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Slope. for Diameter. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 30 Click Modify.Sanitary. select 100 mm.05%. click Solutions. select Intersections. for Solution Type. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select PVC . The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 24 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter -350 mm. enter -350 mm. 25 In the left pane.Sanitary. select Branch. enter 1. The default settings are automatically modified. select Main. and click OK. 26 For Pipe Type. enter -1225. 29 On the Options Bar. 23 For Pipe Type. and modify it to meet project requirements. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. You accept this suggested solution. and for Offset.19 On the Options Bar. 27 For Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click Settings. select PVC . 21 On Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 28 On the Options Bar.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.

37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.36 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Overall. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

rvt. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. in the Type Selector. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. select 560 mmx560 mm .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design is open. under M_Lavatory .Plumbing Plan . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. 5 On the Placement panel. as shown.Rectangular. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 On the Element panel.Public. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.7 Click Modify.2. 8 Select the sink. and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. On the Options Bar. select Multiple.

15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 11 In the System Browser. enter 711. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 12 In the drawing area. click Add To System.2. Press Esc. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. use the ViewCube to orient the view.Design ➤ 3D Views. In the System Browser. as shown. 21 Select the tee.16 On the Edit System panel. 20 Select the fitting. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. double-click 3D Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish Editing System.

and click Apply. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click Draw Pipe. When you press the Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar.22 In the plan view. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . with the tee fitting selected. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. enter 1. for Slope. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). for Offset. enter 760 mm. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. and click to draw the pipe.05%. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 31 Click Modify. select Standard.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC .DWV. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 30 In the 3D view. click to place the fitting. 29 In the Type Selector.

38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. for Offset. on the Options Bar. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. enter 150 mm. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 37 Select the fitting. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 305 mm. and press Enter. right-click the right connector. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. as shown.

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and click Draw Pipe. 49 Using the same method. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 47 Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom connector. 48 Click Modify. and press Esc. enter 150 mm. 46 In the section view. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 52 In the plan view. 51 In the Type Selector. select Standard. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. under M_Trap P .Sch 40 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 56 Using the same method. 53 Using the same method.PVC . 54 Click Modify. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 55 In the 3D view. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.DWV.

. enter 150 mm. Click in the plan view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. In the plan view. 58 Using the same method. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. select the left P-Trap. and press Enter. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Select the double wye pipe on the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.■ In the 3D view. select PVC Sanitary. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select the section of pipe you just drew.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.05% is selected. click Training Files. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that 1. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Finish. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.

Design.Design. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Overall. click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. 9 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 3 In the Section view. 5 Select the tee. 7 On the Selection panel. select the elbow fitting on the right.Floor level line. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select Standard. and click to draw the pipe. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select the vertical stack. right-click the top connector. 10 In the 3D view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.DWV.Plumbing Plan . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You create a new pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. click Training Files.autodesk. and click Duplicate.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. 2 Right-click Standard. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 267 .rvt. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. go to http://www. However. In this lesson. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In this tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After finishing each exercise.

and enter Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. click Rename. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Fire Protection Wet. for Material. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Offset. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. For Pipe Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. and click Properties. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Main. select Carbon Steel. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Next. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 9 Click OK. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Pipe Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). verify that 2800 is specified. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. verify that 2800 is selected. However. For System Type. duct. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. For System Type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. structural beams. In this exercise. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and then click OK. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.

for Name. 6 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. for Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. For Group parameter under.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 Using a crossing window. Under Categories. and then click OK. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. click Add. the space crossing lines display. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select the upper half of the building. and click Element Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Spaces.rvt. enter Zone 1. right-click. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Fire Protection. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.

9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties. under Fire Protection. enter Zone 2. for Sprinkler Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and then click OK. and click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. select Zone 1. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .rvt. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. 13 Using the same method. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. to which you add various parameters. including a calculated value parameter.

For Group parameter under. double-click on each column separator. and click Field Format. select mm. 10 In the Format dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. The schedule displays. select Maximum Spacing. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Fire Protection. select Spaces. select 0 decimal places. For Key name. For Rounding. and on the ribbon. Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Select Schedule keys. 11 Click OK twice. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Units. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Obstructed-Combustible. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 On the Formatting tab. for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Maximum Spacing. 7 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Light. click the Formatting tab. For Type of Parameter. For Name.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select Length. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. click Add Parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 6 Using the same method.Design is highlighted. 14 Select the new header. For Unit symbol. select Millimeters.

select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. and press Enter. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter 4575. enter 40. In the Maximum Coverage Area column.

In the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . click . 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Units. For Type. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Area. select 0 decimal place. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 19 Click the Formatting tab. enter Minimum Sprinklers. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. under Available fields. select Number. select Common. For Discipline. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Click OK. 20 On the Formatting tab. and click OK. For Rounding. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 22 Click OK twice. select Fixed. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).

and select Totals only. and then select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. click Edit. Select Header and Blank line. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and then click Field Format. for Sorting/Grouping. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Hidden field. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Then by. under Other. For Fields. for Sort by. For Then by (second instance). select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. and click View Properties. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. At the bottom of the dialog.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Level. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Under Field formatting. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. Select Header and Blank line.

right-click the schedule. click Edit. for Filter. for Filter by. and click View Properties. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Count. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and Count. select Embedded Schedule.27 In the drawing area. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. click Edit. Under Field formatting. for Embedded Schedule. and select Totals only. System Name. and click View Properties. For Category. On the Formatting tab. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Available fields. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Fields. 30 Click OK twice. under Other. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. delete the word Maximum. select Grand totals. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click Type. select Level equals Level 2. select Calculate totals.

select Ordinary. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. but their values are not determined. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. for Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 50 Access the instance properties. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. The parameter change is evident in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 52 Click OK. 41 In the plan view. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and access the instance properties. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. under Identity Data. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. under Identity Data. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. double-click FP . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Light. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. 44 In the schedule. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Unobstructed.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. select space 221 Instruction.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

At the end of this tutorial. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. As you create the system. methodology. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. As you place the sprinklers. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you can choose to save your work.autodesk. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and double-click Level 2 . hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. If the tutorial training files are not present.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. 279 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However.rvt.

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When there is a small misalignment. When this happens. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. while pressing Ctrl. 10 Press Esc twice. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. select the sprinklers that you placed. as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and 207. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 11 In the drawing area. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 206. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.

and then press Esc. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 200B.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 17 In the Project Browser. you place non-hosted sprinklers. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 18 Type WT. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. as shown. open Design ➤ FP .Design.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Next. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. specify a vertical offset. and 200C). 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

30 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. and click Element Properties. 25 Click OK. move the cursor to the right. and with piping (physical connection). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.19 In the floor plan. enter 11. In the next exercise.0. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . for Offset. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. under Constraints. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.FP_Ceiling view. In this exercise. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Next. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and press Enter. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. For Number. enter 4100. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Notice that the schedule updates. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . This number is determined in the schedule. enter 2900 mm. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. you adjust the offset. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 1 In the Project Browser.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. click Training Files. 5 Right-click the header. Unlike logical connections (systems). physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. However. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select Piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. as shown. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. click View ➤ Systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you assign sprinklers to systems.

In the System Browser. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Creating a Piping System | 285 . indicating the logical connection. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. press Tab. and select the system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. named Fire Protection Wet.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. within the Piping Systems folder. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and click Select. select an initial piping layout. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.

system equipment. 23 For Offset. and a piping layout preview displays. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2.0 is specified. For Pipe Type. click Place Base. enter -3650. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. In the left pane. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). as shown. click Solutions.Wet is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Diameter. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 12 On the Options Bar. select 150 mm. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the System Browser. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 19 Click OK. and number of elements in the system. verify that Main is selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. verify that 2800. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 22 On the Options Bar. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. providing system editing tools. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. For Offset. for System Name.The Edit Piping System panel displays. click Settings. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter FP Wet_Zone2. When the layout is finished. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 In the drawing area. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select Branch. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. verify that Network is selected. Creating a Piping System | 287 . A (parallel movement control) displays. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and green represents branch lines). and select solution 4.

View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. 32 If necessary. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or manually modify the pipe. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Either relocate the system components.

rvt. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. and various manual pipe creation tools. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. 3 If necessary. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.33 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . the Connect Into tool. Next. and select the elbow fitting as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .

The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). air terminals. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. click Finish Editing System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. or a system component to display system tools. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and pipe or duct is created. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. radiators. 9 On the Edit System panel. 5 In the drawing area. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Add To System. 8 In the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and so on) are logically connected by a system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser.

18 Click Finish Editing System. for Solution Type. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and select solution 5.11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 12 On the Options Bar. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 14 Close the System Browser. and then tile the views. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 13 Click Finish Layout. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 21 In the Piping Plan.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. verify that Solutions is selected. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Network is selected.

Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Select the sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .24 In the Piping Plan. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 On the Options Bar. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. right-click. for Offset. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and click Draw Pipe. and then press Esc. select 2800. 28 In the drawing area. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

Design is highlighted. Because the whole system highlights. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.rvt. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 31 In the plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Piping Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click Training Files. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. select 1 : 50. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.

double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .6 Press Esc.

Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. select MEP Section. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select FP . 13 Select the elbow fitting. For Default View Template. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For View Classification.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Press Spacebar. enter 2135. 22 In the drawing area.Design the active view. and click Draw Pipe. and click Apply Default View Template. and then right-click the top connector. Under Identity Data. and press Enter. and then click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 12 If necessary. for View Name. right-click Design ➤ FP . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . enter FP Section_Stair. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 19 Make Level 2 .Design. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee.Fire Protection Plan . 17 Move the cursor up. drag the top section boundary line up. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. select Design. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 14 Select the tee fitting.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select . 24 Select the cabinet. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. for Diameter. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps).23 In the section view.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel.

32 In the Open dialog. 31 In the alert dialog.29 Close the section view. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 33 In the Type Selector. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .rfa. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. click Yes to load a family. verify that M_Gate Valve .50 mm is selected. and then click Modify. and click Open.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers.35 Open 3D Fire Protection.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . starting at the lower left corner of the wing. select 25mm. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. click Check None. Changing the diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 4 In the floor plan view. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. height. for Diameter. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 7 On the Options Bar. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 6 In the Filter dialog. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and click OK. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. width. 8 Click Modify. or width. or height. width. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter.

18 In the 3D view. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. and after each segment highlights. 12 If necessary. . 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. click to place the tag. By hiding the linked file. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. and click Open. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 17 On the View Control Bar.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. NOTE Tags are view specific. Press Esc. Clear Leader. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. select the linked architectural file. They display only in the view in which they were placed. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.rfa. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs).

press Tab. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . for Diameter. The main piping is selected and displays in red. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and when the section highlights.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. 21 On the Options Bar. select 100mm.

select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 26 Using the same method. 23 Close the 3D view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for Diameter. and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. as shown. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 On the Options Bar.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. select 40mm.

You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags to pipes. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 .27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this exercise. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a wet fire protection system. For additional practice. In this tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.

304 .

add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click Properties. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. under Floor Plans. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . dependent views. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click OK. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. If the view included detail graphics.rvt. right-click Copy of Level 1. matchlines. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and view references.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 307 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and apply a view template. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and then press Esc. and click Rename. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Close the file without saving. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. views and put them on the sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the drawing area. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 4 Using the same method. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. more focused. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.rvt. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 9 Click OK. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. as shown.

click the current value. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 13 Press Esc twice. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 19 In the drawing area. select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Pattern.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Weight. select 11. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Double Dash . and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Click OK. and click OK. In the Color dialog. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. on the Options Bar.20 Select the upper view reference and. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 25 Using the same method. 21 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. click Training Files. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 27 Using the same method. for View Name. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Properties.Domestic Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. select Plumbing Isometric. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select the section box. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. For Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise.

10 Right-click. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select 3. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. Click Apply. and click Apply Default View Template. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. The section crop lines no longer display. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. select Documentation. for View Classification. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select Plumbing. and click to select it.Domestic Water.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Dash. For Sub-Discipline. For Pattern. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. Click OK. and then click OK.

press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. 13 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. as shown). 15 Right-click.

17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. click on the Format value. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . For Slope. On the View Control Bar. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.Isometric. specify Plumbing .Sanitary Waste. select 1.5mm Arial. verify that Common is selected. and in the view properties.16 Press Esc. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. and in the Type Selector. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 19 Using methods learned previously. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and for Default View Template.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. you use a plan view to create a callout view.rvt.■ In the Format dialog. click Training Files. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 26 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Rounding. select To the nearest 10. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.

2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. for Scale. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select 1 : 50. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. double-click M601 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 5. and select the viewport. using the same method.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. Click OK. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view.

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 17 In the Project Browser. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Creating Callout Views | 319 . For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. for View Name.

22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. under Names. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the detail view. Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click OK. and click Rename.

322 .

Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. work with model-based components. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m.rvt.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 323 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. symbols. as shown. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Creating Annotations In this exercise. duct tags. linetypes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 With the text still selected. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Press Esc twice. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.

select a supply diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. and then click Right Straight. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.17 Click Modify. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click OK. as shown. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click Open. for Ducts. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. click Load.rfa. 20 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. If necessary. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. under Category. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 25 In the drawing area. 22 In the Tags dialog.

select Horizontal. Leader.26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . and then press Esc. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

33 On the Options Bar. as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader. 36 Press Esc twice. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 40 Using the method learned previously.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. click Training Files. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and lock lighting fixtures. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and all elements of that type are affected. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select the last tag placed. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Leader Arrowhead. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. lay out. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. That’s because you changed a type property.rvt. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. not simply an instance property. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.

330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the dimension line. and then select the interior face of the wall. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 13 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method. On the Options Bar. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 12 Click EQ. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.

19 Select the dimension value (3376. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend | 331 . click the 3 interior locks on the line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Using the same methods. and offset them from the wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.9). you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.rvt. linework. annotation symbols. enter 2430. and notes. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. click Training Files. 17 Press Esc.

place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. select 1 : 50. For Scale. select Floor Plan. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Click OK. and select 1. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click below the title to place the diffuser. enter Diffuser Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.200 Neck.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 5 Click in the drawing area. For View. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.

and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.11 Press Esc. and select 1. click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP and its text note. 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 21 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .

32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . enter E. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. Creating a Legend | 335 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and text. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A detail callout that references another view.rvt.113 East elevation view. A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 337 . detail groups.

8 Using the same method. select each of the 2 panelboards.113 East on the sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 7 Drag the Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it. Next.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then modify and align the views. clear Leader.

for Title on Sheet. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data.9 Press Esc. and click Activate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Deactivate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.

19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you add wiring to the diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. and select Title w Line . 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Press Esc. 21 Using the drag control. as shown. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. select the 113 East elevation view. and click Activate View.

Under Modify Subcategories. 9 Beginning at the transformer. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and click OK. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click New. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . for Name. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select 6. notice that there are no snaps active. 2 Close the Project Browser. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Chain is selected. expand Lines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the Line Styles dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. for Line Weight. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . as shown. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. click Training Files.rvt.113 North view. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. In the New Subcategory dialog. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. As you draw. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. and then click OK.

add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. for Offset. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 3mm.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. as shown.

Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 31 While pressing Ctrl. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 29 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Using the same method. 40 Press Esc. Press Esc. and then press Esc. change the length of the bottom line to 3.0. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3. for Offset. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. enter 12. you can ensure that they stay together. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. You enter exact values for each line length. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. and press Enter. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 7. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. click on the length dimension value.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

while pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. 52 Select the detail group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. expand Groups ➤ Detail.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select all 3 lines. for Name. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 51 Using the method learned previously. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 54 Select the group. and click OK. enter Ground. 47 In the drawing area. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 50 With the group selected. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 46 In the Project Browser.

57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and will place it on sheet E01.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . In later exercises. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.

Walkthroughs. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. select 3D Views. 5 Right-click the copy. Back. 8 On the ViewCube. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 6 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. 3 Select the section box. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Name. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. click Home. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply View Template. and Left sides converge. 4 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click OK.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section).rvt. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3D HVAC Iso. Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.■ ■ Under Names. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. 15 Using the same method. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right).

as shown. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. To rotate and reposition a text label. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and then click OK. and under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 19 Complete the text labels.18 Press Esc. under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop Region Visible.

30 On the View Control Bar. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. click Training Files. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. select Crop View and Section Box. and under Extents.rvt. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view.25 Click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click Activate View. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. scroll down. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and click View Properties. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and click OK. 29 Right click the view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 33 Right-click the view. and click Deactivate View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 In the Instance Properties.

By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. select Documentation. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. select Plumbing. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. and click Properties. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 13 In the drawing area. 12 On the Element panel. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. 9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For Scale. right-click the view name. for Sub-Discipline. select 1 : 5. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.

17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. 22 Click Modify. 21 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.P. select C. and click OK. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. for Type. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. 18 With the filled region still selected. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. (Line). select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 41 Type ZF to zoom out.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region.

as shown. 49 Click Modify. for Name. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw wide detail lines as shown. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.D. and click OK. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. press Tab to highlight the chain.. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and then click to select them. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.

and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. as shown. press Spacebar twice. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 64 Press Esc twice. as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.62 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 67 On the Options Bar. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.

Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. 72 If necessary. 81 Select the text note. 80 Press Esc twice. select 15000 (Division 15 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to specify the text insertion point. 71 Click Modify.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and then click OK. and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail.

and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . select the view title. 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful